Operating instructions | Dodge 2006 HB Durango Automobile User Manual

SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
▫ Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
INTRODUCTION
5
Roll Over Warning
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance, higher center of gravity, and narrower
track than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications.
Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can be caused to
go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity
and the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over when some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, roll over of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
1
Roll Over Warning Label
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year, and could reduce disabling injuries by 2
6
INTRODUCTION
million annually. In a roll over crash an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner manual:
INTRODUCTION
7
1
8
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel area, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and
title.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
INTRODUCTION
9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . .16
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .16
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .24
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .39
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .26
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .42
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . .43
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .74
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
13
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic
bag with the key code number on it. If you received your
keys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you the
number. The key code can also be obtained by the dealer
from your vehicle invoice.
Ignition Key
Ignition Key Removal
Manual Transmission
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the
key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Place the shift lever in P (Park). Turn the ignition switch
to the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
15
WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal, or the gear selector
lever. Do not leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Ignition Key Positions
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition, and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly
to the right or left to disengage the lock.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock (manual transmission only). This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the
steering wheel is moved a half turn in either direction
and the key is not in the ignition, the steering wheel will
lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel 1/2
revolution from straight ahead position, turn off the
engine and remove the key. Rotate the steering wheel
slightly in both directions until the lock engages.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock
cylinder for that vehicle.
Replacement Keys
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the “Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light” will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
If the “Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light” turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN. This number is required for dealer
replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
blank key is one which has never been programmed and
needs to be cut.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime
will sound and the “Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light”
will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds, a single chime will sound and the “Vehicle Theft
Alarm Indicator Light” will stop flashing, turn on again
for 3 seconds, and then turn off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a
total of 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed sentry
key, contact your dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
and the “Security” modes to hear the differences in the
horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will
need to know which mode has been activated in order to
deactivate it.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
To Set the Alarm
The alarm will set when you use the remote keyless entry
transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate or when you use
the power door lock switch while the door is open. After
all the doors are locked and closed, the “Vehicle Security
Alarm Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster)
will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the
system is arming. During this 16 second pre-arm period,
opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming. If
the system successfully arms, the “Vehicle Security
Alarm Indicator Light” will flash at a slower rate to
indicate the alarm is set. A manual lock of the doors,
either with the door lock plunger located on the inside of
the doors or with the driver’s door key lock cylinder, will
not set the alarm.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors, liftgate, and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is
activated, the system provides both audible and visual
signals. The horn will sound repeatedly for three minutes
and the headlights and taillights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
NOTE: The “Panic” and “Security” alarms are quite
different. Please take a moment to activate the “Panic”
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm the System
To disarm the system, use the remote keyless entry
transmitter. Also, using a valid sentry key and moving
the ignition switch to the ON/START position will
disarm the system. If something has triggered the system
in your absence, the horn will sound three times when
you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, once the
system is armed (after 16 seconds), when you pull the
door handle to exit the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
press the “Unlock” button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to disarm the system. The Security Alarm
System will not disarm with a manual unlock, either
through the lock plunger located on the inside of the
door, or through a key in the driver’s door key cylinder.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights come on when you open any door.
They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors
are closed then fade to off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all the doors.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
21
NOTE: Your vehicle’s keyfob may have three, or four
buttons, depending on the optional features purchased
with your vehicle.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm from a minimum
distance of 23 feet (7 meters) using your keyfob. The
keyfob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the “Unlock” button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the “Unlock” button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice.
Three Button Keyfob
NOTE: For the remote starting feature (if equipped),
refer to the “Remote Starting System” section.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door First
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or
driver’s door only upon the first “Unlock” button press
by using the following procedure:
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door
1st” under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section (Section 4) of this manual.
On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following
steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the “Lock” button on your key fob.
3. Continue to hold the “Lock” button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
“Unlock” button while still holding the “Lock” button.
4. Release both buttons at the same time.
5. This will allow you to unlock all doors on the first
press of the “Unlock” button.
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the “Lock” button on the key fob to lock
all doors and liftgate. If the ignition is OFF, when the
doors are locked, the parking lights will flash on once
and the horn will chirp once.
Sound Horn Unlock
Press and release the “Lock” button on the transmitter to
lock all doors and tailgate. The turn signal lights will
flash and the horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock
signal. If desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can
be turned on or off by using the following procedure:
• On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Personal Settings” in the
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section (Section 4) of this manual.
• On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following steps:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
• On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the following steps:
2. Press and hold the “Lock” button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
3. Continue to hold the “Lock” button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the PANIC button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
2. Press and hold the “Unlock” button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Flash Lights With Lock
The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or
off.
• On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to ⬙Personal Settings⬙ in the
EVIC section (Section 4) of this manual.
3. Continue to hold the “Unlock” button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the “Lock” button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Using the Panic Alarm
NOTE: The “Panic” and “Security” alarms are quite
different. Please take a moment to activate the “Panic”
and the “Security” modes to hear the differences in the
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will
need to know which mode has been activated in order to
deactivate it.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
in this section.
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF,
press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter
once. When the Panic mode is activated, the interior
lights will illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights
will flash, and the horn will sound.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
To cancel the Panic mode, press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started or exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). During the Panic
Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry systems
will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the
security system on vehicles so equipped.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
25
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
NOTE: If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Separating Transmitter Halves
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the
batteries is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting
system, which will allow the vehicle to be started up to
300 feet away from the vehicle using the remote keyless
entry key fob which is part of your ignition key.
In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood, liftgate,
and all the doors must be closed.
To remote start your vehicle, press the “Remote Start”
button on the key fob twice within three seconds. To
indicate that the vehicle is about to start, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly (if
programmed).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15
minutes. To cancel remote start, press the “Remote Start”
button once.
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
“Unlock” button on the key fob. After the vehicle is
unlocked, you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle, insert
the key in the ignition and move it to the RUN position,
otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and automatically turn off.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The transmission is moved out of P (Park).
27
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated
but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After
either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is
alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle
must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition
and moving it to the RUN position, then back to LOCK.
DOOR LOCKS
The vacuum fluorescent (VF) display located in the
odometer area displays the word “door” as an indication
of a door ajar or door not completely closed. When the
vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not
completely closed, the VF display will show the word
“door.”
If any other active warnings including “GATE”, or “GASCAP” are present, they will be shown in the VF display
and will also continue to cycle. If the vehicle is moving,
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
three single chimes will occur (One chime for each
complete display cycle (three cycles total). After this, the
display will continue to cycle only (no chimes).
If the trip/reset button is pressed while the VF warnings
are being displayed, the VF display will revert back to
only displaying the odometer/trip odometer mileage.
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Locks
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
29
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press this
switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is selected your door locks will lock
automatically if the vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24
km/h) and all doors are closed. It will reset whenever a
door is opened.
N (Neutral). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — Customer Programmable Features” in
Section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer.
Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
to the lock or unlock position.
This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
Customer Programmable Features” in Section 4 of this
manual or see your authorized dealer.
Automatic Unlock on Exit Feature — Only
Available if Auto Lock is Enabled
This feature will unlock all the doors when the driver’s
door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in P (Park) or
Inserting Ignition Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
2
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACCESSORY position.
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off. For
vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Delay
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit” in Section 4 of this
manual. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this
feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Down
The driver door power window switch, and some model
passenger door power window switches have an “Auto
Down” feature. Press the window switch past the first
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the “Auto Down” movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and release the
switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection
(Driver’s and Front Passenger Door Only)
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure it will reverse direction and then stop.
33
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during auto closure. If this happens pull the switch
lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window
manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door (below
the power window switches) allows you to disable the
window control on the other doors. To disable the
window controls on the other doors, press the window
lockout button. To enable the window controls, press the
window lockout button again.
Power Window Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
The vacuum fluorescent (VF) display located in the
odometer area displays the word “gATE” as an indication of when the liftgate is not completely closed. When
35
the vehicle is not moving, and the liftgate is not completely closed, the VF display will show the word
“gATE.” On EVIC equipped vehicles, “GATE AJAR” will
be displayed.
If any other active warnings are present, they will be
shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle.
If the vehicle is moving, three single chimes will occur if
the rear liftgate is open (one chime for each complete
display cycle). After this, the VF display will continue to
sequence only (no chimes).
If the trip/reset button is pressed while the VF warnings
are being displayed, the VF display will revert back to
only displaying the odometer/trip odometer mileage.
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the
plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the
liftgate.
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and right front passenger, and
side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated
next to a window. If you will be carrying children too
small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used
to hold infant and child restraint systems.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
injuries, including fatalities, if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
37
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision which includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Latch Plate
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate To Buckle
WARNING!
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from
injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
41
Removing Slack From Belt
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS
on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear center
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
43
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy
management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is
not working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module. Like the front airbags, the
pretensioners are a single use item. After a collision that
is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
they must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seconds or until the driver seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. The manufacturer does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
fasten the driver seat belt.
2. Start the engine, and wait for the Seat Belt Warning
Light to turn off.
45
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver seat belt at least three times,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat
belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS)
47
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger side airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
Front Airbag Components
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
⬙Occupant Classification System⬙ in this section).
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. They are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS/AIRBAG.
Window Airbag Location
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You
may damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are no longer functional.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the window bag.
The area where the window bag is located should
remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers.
These items may cause serious injury during
inflation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This
allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that
are based on collision severity. Along with the seat belts,
front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and
front passenger. Window bags also work with seat belts
to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System⬙
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
⬙child⬙ size category. This could be a child, teenager, or
even a adult.
49
The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right
position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat, in a
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. See “Child Restraint” in this section.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window, airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under “If
You Need Assistance” in Section 9 of this manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• The side curtain airbags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in
the center of the seat.
51
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Control Module
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Passenger Airbag
• Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner
• Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front Passenger Seat Only
− Occupant Classification Module
− Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
− Weight Sensors
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module determines if a frontal, side, or rollover collision is severe
enough to require the airbags to inflate. The front
airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates
of airbag inflation from direction provided by the
ORC. The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation
based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant
Classification Module. The ORC will not detect roll
over, or rear impacts.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
inflate.
Also, the ORC turns on the “Airbag Warning
Light” and “PAD Indicator Light” for 6 to 8
seconds for a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the
“Airbag Warning Light” will turn off. The “PAD
Indicator Light” will function normally (Refer to ⬙Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙ in this
section). If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the “Airbag Warning Light”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound if the light comes on again after initial start
up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the “Airbag Warning Light” in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
53
• The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified
in the “child” size category. This could be a child,
teenager, or even a adult.
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
• The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The “PAD Indicator Light” illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR BAG
OFF⬙ to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
front passenger seat is empty or when very light
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
objects are placed on the seat, the passenger airbag
will not inflate even though the “PAD Indicator Light”
is not illuminated.
The “PAD Indicator Light” should not be illuminated
when a adult passenger is properly seated in the front
passenger seat. In this case, the airbag is ready to be
inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs.
For occupants classified into the “child” size category, the
“PAD Indicator Light” will be illuminated indicating that
the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not
inflate. If the “PAD Indicator Light” is not illuminated,
DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off and move the
child restraint to the rear seat. A deploying passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a
rear facing infant seat.
Indicator Light Location
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger Airbag Disable
(PAD) Indicator
Light
OFF
Airbag Status
Adult
ON
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other RelaON
OFF
tively Light Objects
Empty or Very
OFF*
OFF
Small Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system. Objects
hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down
on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult
55
will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case,
the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an
adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position
(with their feet on or near the floor) in order to be
properly classified. Reclining the seat back too far may
change how an occupant is classified by the OCS.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the
“PAD Indicator Light” is not illuminated when an adult
is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle
(like the door or instrument panel), the weight sensors in
the seat may not properly classify the occupant. Objects
lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center
console can prevent the occupant’s weight from being
measured properly and may result in the occupant being
improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger
seat back does not touch anything placed on the back seat
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
because this can also affect occupant classification. Also,
if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn’t
touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the “Airbag Warning
Light” (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. The “Airbag Warning Light” is turned
on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation
of the airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS,
both the “PAD Indicator Light” and the “Airbag Warning
Light” are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag
is turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is
lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of
the weight sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both
the “PAD Indicator Light” and the “Airbag Warning
Light.” Once the lodged object is removed, the fault will
be automatically cleared after a short period of time.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
are possible, based on collision severity and occupant
size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The
bags fully inflate in about 50–70 milliseconds. This is
about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module. The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag
should be turned off. It also determines the rate of
airbag inflation during a collision.
• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
57
• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When
the ORC detects a collision requiring the side curtain
airbag to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash
side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is
generated to inflate the side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one
quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only
about 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module detects a
moderate-to-severe frontal collision, to help restrain the
driver and front passenger, and then to immediately
deflate.
59
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioner, and seat belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Also, have the Occupant Classification
System serviced as well.
Enhanced Accident Response Feature
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag
may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system
service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced
in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video players on the right front
passenger seat back. The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant. This
could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired.
You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or locate
any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure
to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
61
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate
for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
promptly:
• Does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds after the
ignition switch is first turned on.
• Remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval.
• Comes on for any period of time while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to 5-seconds of specific vehicle data parameters
(see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to
the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment,
and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
data during and/or after air bag deployment or neardeployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
NOTE:
• A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant
airbag deployment.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
• Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
involving
a
63
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact acceleration and angle
• Seat belt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
4. Otherwise required by law
• Transmission gear selection
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Cruise control status
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
• Traction/stability control status
• Tire pressure monitoring system status
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20
lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage
System in this section.)
65
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Except for the second row center seating position, all
passenger seat belts are equipped with “automatic
locking retractors identified by a distinctive label.”
The second row center position has a cinching latch
plate identified by a distinctive label. Both types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt (the cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight). However, any seat
belt system may loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. For the
second row seat belts with the automatic locking
retractors, pull the belt from the retractor until there is
enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint
and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the
belt until it is fully extracted from the retractor. Allow
the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess
webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child
restraint. For additional information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
secure, try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
67
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
NOTE:
For additional information refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
to
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction, are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are
older than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System in this section.)
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
The two outboard rear seating positions have lower
anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCHcompatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted
lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only.
Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,
NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that
two seats share a common lower anchorage.
69
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to the next section for
typical installation instructions.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
Latch Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three
straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat
where you are placing the child restraint and attach the
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
belt. However, any seat belt system may loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
necessary.
If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will
have a distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor
until there is enough to allow you to pass through the
child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle.
Then, pull the belt until it is all extracted from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling
on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about
the child restraint. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
earlier in this section.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Route the tether strap over the seat back and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether over
the head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
73
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Tether Strap Mounting
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for a extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode
when driving with any windows open, even if only
slightly, to help keep fresh air circulating inside vehicle. Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into
the vehicle.
75
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor
condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned on. If the bulb is not lit during starting, have it
replaced. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defrosters
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should feel the air
directed against the windshield.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes
are detected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .82
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .84
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Front Seat Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . 111
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ 6–Way Driver’s Power Seat With Manual
Recliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Headlight Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . 122
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Parking Lights, Instrument Panel Lights, And
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 125
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
79
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Programming The Universal Transceiver . . . . . 136
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ “Rolling Code” Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 139
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Reprogramming A Single Button . . . . . . . . . . 140
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
3
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 151
䡵 Electrical Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Utility Table — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 145
▫ Rear Cargo Slide Out System (Load N Go威) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Power Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Front Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . . 155
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . . 156
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 157
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
81
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of truck). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
mirror. A light in the button will indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
83
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage.
Power Remote Control Mirrors
Use the mirror select switch, located on driver’s side door
trim panel, to adjust the view obtained in the outside
mirrors. Press the switch to the L or R for Left or Right
mirror selection.
3
Power Mirror Switches
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-Out” Feature
The sun visor “slide-on rod ” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.
1. Fold down sun visor.
2. Pull the sun visor toward inside rearview mirror to
extend.
Lighted Vanity Mirror
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phone book enables you to store up to
32 names and four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phone book accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
85
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
Microphone Location
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the radio has the two control buttons that will
enable you to access the system. Actual button location
may vary with radio. The individual buttons are described in the “Operations” section.
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
UConnect Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
87
example, you can either use the combined form voice
command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break
the combined form command into two voice commands: ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the UConnect™ system works best when you talk
in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some
one sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following the beep. The UConnect™ system will play all the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the radio control head.
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
NOTE:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
89
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
Dial by Saying a Number
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
valid phone number has ten digits.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone
book. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the phone
book.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phone book is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phone book
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phone book entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phone book with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phone book accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing names in the phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• You will then be asked for the name of the phone book
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
91
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phone book entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phone book entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phone book
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phone book
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
• Note that only the phone book entry in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phone book entries will be
deleted.
• Note that only the phone book in the current language
is deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phone book entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
93
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press ’Phone’ button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phone book
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls,
refer to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the ‘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone.
95
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect™ system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phone book
is usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
97
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
99
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute-off.⬙
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information. This is a AT&T provided service.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice Recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
101
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately within 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect™ system Voice Training feature may be used. To
enter this training mode, follow one of the two procedures:
From outside the UConnect™ mode (e.g. from radio
mode)
• Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Setup,
Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect™ system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
103
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phone book.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• UConnect™ phone book name tag recognition rate is
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phone book.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows, and
• dry weather condition.
• operation from driver seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
105
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Fancais
help
home
language
list names
list phones
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
select phone
send
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
try again
voice training
work
yes
pairing
phone book
return or main menu
select
phone settings or phone
set up
109
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Front Manual Seat Adjustment
Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment
bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near
the floor. Position the seat and be sure the latch engages
fully.
Manual Seat Adjustment
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seat Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward, and release the lever.
Seatback Release Lever
111
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6–Way Driver’s Power Seat with Manual Recliner
The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near
the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up or down,
forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Power Seat Switches
This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to
the rear of the power seat switch. Pull up on the lever to
recline the seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger seat can be folded flat to allow for
extended cargo space. Pull up on the lever to fold down
the seat back.
Fold Flat Passenger Seat
113
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable head
restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as
high as practical. The head restraints have a locking
button that must be pushed inward to lower the head
restraint. The head restraints may be raised without
pushing in the button.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The front driver and passenger seats are heated. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel. After turning on the
ignition, you can choose from High, Low, or Off heat
settings. Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the
switch once will select high-level heating.
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically
after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Heated Seat Switches
Pressing the switch a second time will select low-level
heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the
heating elements off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still
maintain some rear seating room.
115
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear
seat to recline the seatback.
3
Rear Seat Release Strap
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
WARNING!
To Lower Rear Seat
1. Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of
each rear seatback.
2. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle).
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Rear Seat Release Strap
3. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. If desired, push down on the seatback to lock it in the
folded position.
To Raise Rear Seat
If locked in the folded position, pull the release strap
(toward the front of the vehicle).
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
3
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
117
Hood Release Lever
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Then push the safety latch lever to the left. It is located
between the grille and hood opening right of the center.
edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
NOTE: Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip
before closing hood to prevent damage to grille.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
Underhood Safety Latch
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Interior Lights
The overhead light comes on when a door is opened. It
may also be turned on by rotating the control for the
dimmer switch on the multi-function control lever fully
upward.
Multi-Function Control Lever
The multi-function control lever controls the operation of
the parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming,
and turn signals.
The overhead light will automatically turn off in about 20
minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left
in the dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON to
restore the overhead light operation.
Daytime Brightness Feature
Certain instrument panel components (odometer, radio
display) can be illuminated at full brightness during the
daytime. This can be helpful when driving with your
headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or
a funeral procession. To activate this feature, rotate the
left stalk one detent lower than the dome light.
119
Multifunction Control Lever
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights, Instrument Panel Lights, and
Headlights
Turn the end of the multi-function control lever to the
first detent for parking lights and instrument panel
lights. Turn to the second detent for headlight operation.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the multi-function control
lever up or down.
NOTE: If the driver’s door is left open, and the headlights or parking lights are left on, the “High Beam
Indicator Light” will flash and a chime will sound.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned off, a chime will sound when the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlight Dimmer Switch
Push the multi-function control lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multi-function control lever toward
the steering wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn
on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is in the multi-function
control lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking or low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the lever.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
121
Turn Signals
Move the multi-function control lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
NOTE: A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on
for more than 1 mile (2 km).
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the
vehicle has been driven approximately 3 feet (1 meter).
They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when
the headlights are switched on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is
left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Move the lever to the DELAY
position, then select the delay interval by turning the end
of the lever. The delay can be regulated from a maximum
of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle
every second.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Move the lever upward to the second detent for LO speed
wiper operation, or to the third detent for HI speed
operation
123
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for as long as the lever is held plus two wipe
cycles, then turn OFF.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, push down on the lever under the
multi-function control lever and move the wheel up or
down, as desired. Pull the lever back upwards to lock the
column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The
speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
125
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in
use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Speed Control Switch
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the “RESUME
ACCEL” lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
pushing up and holding “RESUME ACCEL”. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
lever towards you “CANCEL”, or normal brake or clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed
control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing
the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch
erases the set speed memory.
Tapping “RESUME ACCEL” once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (6 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down
and hold “SET DECEL”. Release the lever when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping the “SET DECEL” button once will result in a 1
mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
NOTE: The Speed Control system has been designed to
shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are
operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation. If this occurs, the system can be reactivated by
pushing the speed control switch ON/OFF button and
re-setting the desired vehicle SET speed.
Manual Transmission
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed
control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need
to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without
speed loss.
127
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake
Assist System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) and ESP
(Electronic Stability Program). All five systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions are commonly referred to as ESP.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.
WARNING!
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABSequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TCS (Traction Control System)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability
Program)” in this section.
129
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It
can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM can not
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
131
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator
Light⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has 2 available operating modes in 2WD,
4WD Part Time, 4WD Full Time, and on 2WD vehicles.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD, 4WD
Part Time, 4WD Full Time, and on 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most all driving
situations. ESP should only be turned off for specific
reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
“ESP OFF” switch (located in the center stack lower
switch bank). When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESP function normally. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or
gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would
normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESP
133
on again, momentarily depress the “ESP OFF” switch.
This will restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
3
ESP Off Switch
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. Once the
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily
depressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
• ⬙The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ and the ⬙ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp⬙ come on momentarily each time the
ignition switch is turned ON.
ESP/BAS Warning Lamp
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with BAS. The “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster both come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. They
should go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The HomeLink威 system will be disabled if the
Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped) is in the Prearmed,
Armed or Alarming state. The HomeLink威 system will
only operate when the Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped)
is in the Disarmed mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
135
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Universal Transceiver
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held
transmitter before programming. If your garage door
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an antenna,
make sure that the antenna is hanging straight down.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
3
NOTE: Do not repeat Step 2 to program additional hand
held transmitters.
3. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons
to program. Place the hand held controller one to three
inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its
indicator light in view.
HomeLink Buttons
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter
button and the desired Universal Transceiver button. Do
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed.
NOTE: Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed
under Canadian Programming.
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid
flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90
seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the
Universal Transceiver.
manufactured after 1996, your garage door opener or
other device may have a “Rolling Code” system.
NOTE: If you do not successfully program the Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand held
transmitter, refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or call
toll free for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515, or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
• Check the owner’s manual for the device for mention
of “Rolling Codes”.
“Rolling Code” Programming
NOTE: If your hand held transmitter appears to program the Universal Transceiver, but your garage door or
other device does not operate, and your device was
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the
copying of your code.
To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code”
system:
• Press and hold the programmed button on the Universal Transceiver. If the Universal Transceiver indicator
light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds,
the device has the “Rolling Code” feature.
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing the Programming
portion of this text:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The assistance of a second person may make the
following programming procedure quicker and easier.
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have
difficulty in locating the training button, check your
garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on
the Internet, at www.homelink.com.
2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.
NOTE: After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to
start step 3.
3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and
firmly press and release the garage door button. Press
and release the button a second time to complete the
139
training process. Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to complete the
training.
Your garage door opener should now recognize your
Universal Transceiver. The remaining two buttons may
now be programmed if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the Programming instructions. You may
use either your Universal Transceiver or your original
hand-held transmitter to open you garage door.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand
held transmitter button every two seconds during programming.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver
button while you press and release the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been learned.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and
then rapidly when the programming is successful.
NOTE: When programming such a garage door opener
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to
the garage door or gate motor.
Operation
Press and hold the desired button on the Universal
Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins
to operate. The light in the display shows that the signal
is being transmitted. The hand held transmitter may also
be used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single Button
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been
completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after
20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter one to
three inches away from the button to be trained.
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to
flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights
begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold. This allows the
sunroof to move towards the closed position.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and
will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
This vehicle has two auxiliary power outlets that can
provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet located in the lower portion of the
instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can
be covered when not in use. As a safety precaution, the
outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the
ignition switch ON. When the optional Cigar Lighter
heating element is used, it heats when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
heating position.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear power outlet (if equipped) is located in the left
rear cargo area.
145
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
WARNING!
Rear Power Outlet
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER
There is a 110–volt, 150–watt inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current to
AC current. This outlet can be used to power small
appliances and electronics.
Press the switch located in the center stack lower switch
bank to turn the power on to the outlet. Press the switch
again to turn the power off.
Power Inverter Switch
Power Inverter
NOTE: Due to build in overload protection the inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use a 3—Prong Adaptor.
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CUP HOLDERS
In the center console there are two cup holders for the
front seat passengers.
NOTE: The cup holder insert is removable from the
console, for cleaning.
3
Front Cup Holders
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear passengers have cup holders at the rear of the
center console.
STORAGE
Front Storage Compartment
The front storage compartment (located on the left side of
the instrument panel) can hold cell phones, PDA’s, and
other small items.
Rear Cup Holders
Front Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage Compartment
To open, press the latch and lift cover.
149
The center console has a removable storage tray which
can hold cell phones, PDA’s, and other small items.
3
Center Console
Removable Storage Tray
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light
The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate,
opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control on
the multi-function control lever to the extreme top position.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor should be used
to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only
the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading
your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. In
order to use the cargo load floor, use the following
procedure:
WARNING!
1. Push side mounted release handles (toward center of
vehicle) to release cover.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
Cargo Load Floor — If Equipped
The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility.
One side features a plastic lined tray which can hold a
variety of items. The maximum load capacity of the load
floor is 400 lbs (181 kg).
Floor Panel
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Lift cover.
3. Flip cover over, and lock panel back into position.
Utility Table — If Equipped
The cargo load floor can be converted into a utility table.
The maximum load capacity of the utility table is 100 lbs
(45 kg).
In order to use the utility table, use the following
procedure:
Load Floor
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Push side mounted release handles (toward center of
vehicle) to release cover.
153
4. Insert the legs into their corner positions.
5. Set the table on level ground.
CAUTION!
To avoid personal injury, do not stand or sit on the
table.
Floor Panel
2. Lift the cover and remove from vehicle.
3. Flip the cover over, and remove table legs from their
retainers.
Rear Cargo Slide Out System (LOAD N GO姞) — If
Equipped
The sliding cargo load floor (LOAD N GO威) slides back
and forth on steel tracks for convenience. The maximum
load capacity is 400 lbs (181 kg). The floor panel can stop
every 2 inches (50 mm) when the handle is released, to
lock the panel in position.
3
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Squeeze the right hand release handle.
Sliding Panel
Release Handle
3. Pull out the sliding panel.
4. Squeeze the right hand release handle to slide the
panel back into the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
A rotary ring switch on the control lever (located on the
right side of the steering column), controls operation of
the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating the center of
the switch up to the “On” position will activate the wiper.
Rotating the switch ring beyond the “On” or “Off”
position will activate the rear washer. The wash pump
will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is
engaged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle three times
before returning to the set position.
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the switch is set
at.
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the swing gate flip-up window is open or the swing
gate is open, connection to the rear window wiper is
interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade.
When the swing gate flip-up window or the swing gate is
closed, the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs
to be turned OFF, and then to ON to restart the rear
wiper.
NOTE: The rear swing gate will lock while the rear
wiper is operating. The gate will stay locked until the
wiper is turned off and the gate is unlocked (by key,
lock switch, or key fob).
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment, and should be checked for fluid
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The push-button is located on
the bottom of the blower control knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster, and the optional electric remote control heated
mirrors. An amber light
shows that the defroster is on.
The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten
minutes. For five more minutes of operation, press the
switch again. To prevent excessive battery drain, use the
defroster only when the engine is operating.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Also, keep all
objects a safe distance from the window to prevent
damaging the heating elements.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof when equipped with a
luggage rack must not exceed 68 kg (150 lbs.), and should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
The tie loops provided in the side rails can be used to
help tie down cargo, however crossbars should always be
used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Tie loops
157
should not be used on their own to attach luggage to the
roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the
load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars are offered by Mopar威 accessories.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
䡵 Compass And Trip Computer — If Equipped . . . 175
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 177
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Telephone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . 188
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4
160
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio
And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA Aux Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 Aux Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 207
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 192
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 217
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . . 200
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 217
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . . 202
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . 205
䡵 Sales Code RER — AM/FM/CD/DVD Radio
With Navigation System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 219
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio . . . . . 219
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
161
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode (RSC Radios) . . . . . . . 222
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . . . . . . 222
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And
Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES®)威 (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
䡵 Video Entertainment System
(Sales Code XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4
162
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
163
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
164
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when
ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Fuel Cap Indicator
This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel cap is located.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge needle will likely indicate a
high temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or when towing a trailer. If
the needle rises to the “H” mark, stop the vehicle, shift
into N (Neutral) increase engine speed for 2-3 minutes. If
the temperature reading does not return to normal, seek
authorized service immediately.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running as you would not be able to react to
the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
The gauge pointer will remain near its last reading when
the engine is turned off. It will return to a true reading
when the engine is restarted.
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1/8
of a tank or less.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
165
5. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light comes on for several seconds after the
ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle
up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat
belt remains unbuckled. If this light flashes, it indicates a
fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches ⬙H⬙, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound
after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will
cause the temperature gauge to pass ⬙H⬙, the indicator
will continuously flash, and a continuous chime will
occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
6. Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. For a bulb check, this light will come on
momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shift into N
(Neutral) and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3
minutes. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, seek authorized service immediately.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until
the light turns off. If the if the light remains on, turn
the engine off immediately, and call for service.
4
166
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
7. Speedometer
Shows the vehicles speed.
8. High Beam Indicator Light
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
9. Security Alarm System Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set.
The security light will also come on for about three
seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning
Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light – If
Equipped
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined
with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster both come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
They should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in
either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48
km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE: The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ and the ⬙ESP/
BAS Warning Lamp⬙ come on momentarily each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. The ESP Control System
will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively
operating.
11. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped
The TOW/HAUL button is located on the gear
shift bezel. This light will illuminate when the
TOW/HAUL button has been selected.
12. Turn Signal Indicator Light
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
167
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective turn
signal LED. A single chime is activated when the left/
right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM vehicle
speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more than one
mile.
13. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in N
(Neutral) until the light goes off.
14. Brake Warning Light
The red “BRAKE” warning light will come on when the
ignition key is first turned on, and stay on briefly as a
4
168
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
bulb check. If the bulb does not come on during starting,
see your authorized dealer for service. If the light stays
on, it may be an indication that the parking brake has not
been released, or there is a low brake fluid level. If the
light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the
Brake Booster. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related
to the brake Booster the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake.
If the parking brake is applied, the light will flash when
the gear position is out of park for automatic transmissions.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. Operating the vehicle in this condition is dangerous!
15. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable,
however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
16. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedometer area illuminates with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON/RUN position. It
should go out with the engine running. The
⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The
⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ also flashes when TCS is
active. If the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” becomes illuminated when the
ESP-Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially
available caused by lack of engine management or brake
thermal model.
169
17. Voltage Warning Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
The light should turn on momentarily as the
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.
18. SERV (Service) 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “SERV 4WD Indicator Light” will come on
when the ignition key is turned to the ON
position and will stay on for 2 seconds. If the
light stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
19. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
which is described elsewhere in this manual.
This light will come on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
4
170
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
approximately 3 seconds. If this light remains on or
comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. See your authorized dealer immediately. With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are
also switched off. Both malfunction indicator lights illuminate with the engine running. If the charging voltage
falls below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator light
illuminates and the ABS is switched off. When the
voltage is above this value again, the malfunction indicator light should go out and the ABS is operational. If
the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated, have
the system checked at your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
20. Front Fog Light Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light shows when the fog lights are ON.
21. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has
become too low. For a bulb check, this light will
come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. Immediate service
should be obtained.
22. Airbag Warning Light
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. If
the light does not come on when the ignition is
first turned on, or the light stays on or comes
on while driving, have the airbag system checked by an
authorized dealer.
23. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(rpm x 1000).
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
24. Transmission Range Indicator
The electronic gear selector display is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of
each position to all other positions. For a good signal the
display will place a box around the selected transmission
range (PRND21). If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 (no boxes) have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
171
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
4
172
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected.
The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the
fault condition is removed and reset.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
26. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer,
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the
Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip
mode, until the Trip Odometer resets.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message off. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
173
27. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
which monitors the emissions and engine control
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 10
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condition investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
4
174
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
28. Cruise Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
29. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. When the trip
odometer is displayed, press once for Trip A, and press
again for Trip B. If the instrument cluster is a base cluster
(no separate compass/temperature display), press the
button a third time for outside Ambient Temperature on
the odometer display. Press and hold the button for two
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
Press this button to view the compass display (if
equipped). Refer to “Compass/Trip Computer” in this
section.
30. Compass/Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Display—If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Compass/Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) messages.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
175
COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF
EQUIPPED
The Compass/Trip Computer features a driverinteractive display (displays information on outside temperature, compass direction, and trip information). It is
located on the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel
and engine temperature gauge, and the tachometer.
4
Compass/Trip Computer Display
The compass/trip computer, when the appropriate conditions exist, will show the following messages in the
odometer display:
• Door Ajar (door)
• Lift Gate Ajar (gATE)
176
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
• Loose Fuel Cap (gASCAP)
These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
the right button (on the instrument cluster).
Control Buttons
Press and release the odometer/trip odometer reset button (right side of the instrument cluster) to access the
compass/trip computer displays.
Display Button
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
177
Trip Conditions
Compass/Temperature Display
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button (on the instrument cluster) to switch from odometer, to trip A or trip B.
Press and hold the right button while the odometer/trip
odometer is displayed to reset.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. In order to ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the
compass variance map zone that the vehicle is in.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
4
178
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
To Set the Variance
Start the engine, and leave the transmission in the P
(Park) position. Press and hold (approximately ten seconds) the odometer/trip odometer reset button until the
current variance zone number is displayed. To change the
zone, press and release the odometer/trip odometer reset
button to increment the variance one step. Repeat as
necessary, until the desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During programming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
zone 1.
Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the compass make sure the proper zone is selected.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
To Manually Calibrate the Compass
Start the engine, and leave the transmission in the P
(Park) position. Press and hold (approximately 10 seconds) the odometer/trip odometer reset button until the
current variance zone number is displayed. Release the
odometer/trip odometer reset button, then press and
hold again (approximately 10 seconds), until the direction is displayed with the “CAL” indicator on continuously in the display. To complete the compass calibration,
drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree
circles under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from power
lines, large metallic objects, until the “CAL” indicator
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
179
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located on the
instrument cluster in the lower half of the fuel/coolant
temperature gauge.
4
180
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons
(described in this section) are also equipped with the
EVIC. The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (If Equipped)
• Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
• Compass display
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system displays (If Equipped)
• Navigation system screens (If Equipped)
• Audio mode display
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status, Personal Settings, and Telephone (if
equipped).
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. Also, the FUNCTION SELECT button changes the current CD track being played
(if so equipped) when the EVIC is in the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features).
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
181
Press
and
release
the
COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight
compass readings and the outside temperature.
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)
• Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of this
manual.
• Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of this
manual.
4
182
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
• Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of
this manual.
• Elapsed Time
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of
this manual.
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
• Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of this
manual.
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5 of
this manual for more details)
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty
• Display Units of Measure in
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
• Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
183
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
• Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3
seconds of resetting the currently displayed function
(>Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window).
• When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display.
• Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature.
4
184
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) menu is reached.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360° turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
185
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
4
186
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
2 seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
Telephone — If Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Telephone”
displays in the EVIC.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC provides the following telephone information:
• Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery
strength, and signal strength in increments of 20
percent.
• Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air
time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed,
roaming, and no phone connection.
• UConnect Active.
• Caller ID phone number display.
When the appropriate conditions exist, and if supported
by the cell phone, the EVIC will display the following
telephone symbols:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
signal strength of the UConnect™ phone. The
number of horizontal bars increases as the
Signal strength of the UConnect™ phone signal inStrength creases.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an
incoming call.
Incoming Call
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
you have voice mail.
Voice
Mail
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently in analog
mode.
Analog
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently roaming.
Roaming
187
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a
text message.
Text
Message
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
battery strength of the UConnect™ phone.
Battery
Strength
4
188
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
a phone connection has been made.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the Connect™ phone is currently not available.
Language
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
Call in
Progress
Phone
Not
Available
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect™
language selection. Please refer to “Language Selection”
in the HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™)
section of this manual for details.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened.
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless
entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
189
unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st
Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
4
190
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90
sec.” appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
UConnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Display Units of Measure in
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or
“METRIC” appears.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
191
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
4
192
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
REQ Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
193
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will be
displayed. In AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button
will switch between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
4
194
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
control knob.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
TUNE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control
knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at step
2.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and
MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
left side speakers.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
left or right to adjust the sound level between the front
and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting
tone, balance and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or
turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.
Toggle the Music Type button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
195
16 Digit-Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
4
196
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Use Tune Control Knob to scroll through the
entries, and push Audio/Select button to select an entry
and make changes.
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (If Equipped).
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD or pausing the DVD, by
pushing the SELECT button (If Equipped).
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
197
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
• VES Power - Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF (If
Equipped).
• Subtitle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (If Equipped).
• VES Lock - Locks out rear VES remote controls (If
Equipped).
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (If Equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if it is supported by the DVD disc
(If Equipped).
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
entries varies depending upon the disc.
NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing
a DVD.
• VES CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change mode of
either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones, by pressing
the Audio/Select button (If Equipped).
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button will
allow user to set the clock. Turn TUNE control knob to
adjust the hours then press and turn the TUNE control
knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE control
knob again to save changes.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
4
198
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Menu Language — If Equipped
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If customer wishes to select
a language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other⬙.
Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control
knob to scroll up and down to select the # and then push
to select.
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default
subtitle language (effective only if language supported
by disc). If customer wishes to select a language not
listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other⬙. Enter the
country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up
and down to select the # and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default
audio language (effective only if language supported by
disc). If customer wishes to select a language not listed,
then scroll down and select ⬙other⬙. Enter the country
code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down
to select the # and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between
subtitle OFF or ON.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum
audio dynamic range - The default is set to ⬙High⬙ and
under this setting, dialogues are played at 11 db higher
than if the setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between
wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted, it
will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play
the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto play the main title. In such cases, use the menu
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons (Radio Mode)
Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
199
SET Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12 FM and
12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can
be selected by pressing the push-button twice.
4
200
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
CAUTION!
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to a authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum total of 5 times.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the push-button with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the eject button and the push-button with
the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD
was loaded and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display
will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is being
ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
201
Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs
will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD,
MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
202
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files, however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
RND Button (Random Play Button) (CD MODE)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
203
If a disc contain multi formats, such as CD audio and
mp3/wma tracks, the radio will only play the mp3/wma
tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
4
204
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
WMA Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
WMA
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
205
Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to
return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more
and radio will display song titles for each file.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
206
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.
Dolby
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories.
⬙Dolby⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
207
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
4
DTS
⬙DTS⬙ and ⬙DTS 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.
RES Radio
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
208
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn the radio
on. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time
to turn the radio off.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM or FM frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station
before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press
SCAN a second time.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will be
displayed. In AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button
will switch between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
control knob.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
TUNE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control
knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button,
and selecting SET CLOCK. Once in this display follow
the above procedure, starting at step 2.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
209
TUNE Control
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and
MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
left side speakers.
4
210
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
left or right to adjust the sound level between the front
and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting
tone, balance and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or
turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.
Toggle the Music Type button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
16 Digit-Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
211
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
user to set the clock. Turn TUNE control knob to adjust
the hours then press and turn the TUNE control knob
to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE control knob
again to save changes.
AM and FM Buttons
Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
4
212
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be stored into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM and 12 FM
stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
an inch, a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected
before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
213
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual—media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
4
214
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD,
MP3 modes.
SCAN Button
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
215
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
4
216
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
217
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more
and radio will display song titles for each file.
4
218
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to
return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds (when
ignition is off).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SALES CODE RER — AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (RER) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes.
This radio has a hard drive. CD’s can be ripped to the
hard drive, and the map data comes loaded on the hard
drive. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
219
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
To manually set the clock, change the time zone, or
change daylight savings information, use a ball point pen
or similar object to press the hour (H) or minute (M)
buttons on the radio. The Setup screen appears.
Setting the Clock
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position.
Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object, press
4
220
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
either the H button on the faceplate to change the hour or
the M button on the faceplate to change the minute.
2. The time setting will increase each time you press the
button. Holding either button in will fast forward the
setting.
3. If no changes are made within 5 seconds of accessing
the Setup screen, the screen will time out and you will be
taken to the last mode.
NOTE: To reset the clock, select the appropriate time
zone and press ENTER. The clock will revert to the
accurate time based on the time zone you selected.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Highlight “Clock Setup” and press ENTER.
2. At the Clock Setup screen highlight the box next to
“Time Zone” and press ENTER.
3. Highlight the appropriate time zone for you location
and press ENTER to store your selection. Select “Done”
when finished.
NOTE: When you are traveling and enter a new time
zone, the cluck must be reset manually for the new zone.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
1. Highlight the box next to “Time” and press ENTER.
2. Select Daylight Savings when Daylight Savings Time
is in effect or Select Standard if Daylight Savings Time is
not being observed. press ENTER.
3. Select “Done” when finished.
Select “Done” to exit from the clock setting mode.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of
SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factoryinstalled satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will
contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm
subscription information, including the set up of your
on-line listening account at no additional charge. For
further information, call the toll-free number 888-5397474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com.
Please have the following information available when
calling:
221
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With RSC Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY
position and the radio ON, press the SETUP button and
scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID
number will be displayed. The Sirius ID number display
will time out in 2 minutes. Press any button on the radio
to exit this screen.
4
222
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Selecting Satellite Mode (RSC Radios)
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for 8 seconds before continuing
to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist, Song
Title, and Composer (if available) information. Also,
pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional
3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of
the time (press and hold again to return to normal
display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the channel.
223
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
4
224
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the SELECT button
to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used
to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.
SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the channel will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second channel to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
push-button memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to push-button memory {12 Satellite stations}.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES姞) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
225
4
The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the
front seats. Press the release button and lower the screen.
Overhead Display Screen
226
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Remote Control Location
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
227
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
4
228
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
The controls for the heating/air conditioning and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls
The instrument panel features four airflow registers. Two
registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument
panel and two are located in the center of the instrument
panel. These registers can be fully closed to partially
block airflow, and they can be adjusted to direct airflow
where the occupant desires.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Blower Control
229
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate
the amount of air forced
through the system in any
mode you select. The fan
speed increases as you turn
the outer control ring to the
right from the OFF position.
Use this control to regulate
the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
230
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Mode Control
The mode control allows you
to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the
symbols, or a blend of two of
these modes. The closer the
control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you receive from that
mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the four outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
air flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature (Hot) settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
the fan switch is not in the A/C position. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel
economy, use these modes only when necessary.
231
Circulation Control
Press the mode control knob
to activate the recirculation
mode. A lamp (in the knob)
will illuminate when you are
in recirculate mode. Press the
knob again to deactivate the
system. Only use the recirculation mode to temporarily
block out any outside odors,
smoke, or dust and to cool the
interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid
weather.
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of
4
232
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
NOTE: Recirculation mode will not operate in floor, mix
or defrost modes.
Air Conditioning Operation
Press the temperature control
knob to activate the air conditioning mode. A lamp will
illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged.
Press the knob again to deactivate the system.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning on the air conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended. Refer to Fluids and
Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into
N (Neutral) and depress the accelerator slightly for fast
idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.
233
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
䡵 Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ 6-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ Shift Lock Manual Override — If Equipped . . . 248
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or –29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 249
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ 4–Speed Automatic Transmission
(3.7L Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ 5–Speed Automatic Transmission
(4.0L Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5
236
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Mp 143 Single-Speed Part-Time
Transfer Case — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Shifting Procedure - Electronically
Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Mp 140 Single-Speed Full-Time
Transfer Case — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . 281
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 272
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ 3.7L Engine (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ 4.0L Engine (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
237
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5
238
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Towing – 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Towing — 4WD Or All-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
239
CAUTION!
Manual Transmission
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
in N (Neutral) and depress the clutch pedal before
starting vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch
interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the
clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the selector lever in the N (Neutral)
or P (Park) position. Apply the brake before shifting to
any driving range.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.
5
240
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transmission Only
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key briefly
to START position, and release it. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running.
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
Ignition Key Positions
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING
241
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
5
242
STARTING AND OPERATING
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedures should be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three wire extension cord.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt AC electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are
expected to last for several days.
243
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
6-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
5
244
STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the shift pattern on the gearshift knob.
NOTE: The backup lights will come on when your
vehicle is in R (Reverse) gear and the ignition is in the ON
position.
WARNING!
When parking your vehicle, always leave a manual
transmission in first gear and apply the parking
brake fully to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage. Never use any gear as a
substitute for the parking brake.
CAUTION!
To drive as safely as possible and to prolong the life
of your manual transmission, follow these tips:
Manual Shift Controls
• Before shifting from a forward gear into reverse, or
from reverse to a forward gear, stop vehicle completely. Otherwise, accelerated transmission wear may
result.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Do not operate at sustained high engine or road
speeds in lower gears. Engine damage may result.
• Do not downshift into a low gear while traveling at too
high a speed for that gear. Engine, clutch, or transmission damage may result.
• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This causes
heat buildup and damages the clutch.
• When you slow down or go up a grade, downshift as
speed requires or the engine may overheat.
• Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the
clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged.
• During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
up. This is normal.
• Push in the clutch pedal completely when shifting.
Otherwise, transmission or clutch damage may result.
245
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between a
forward gear and reverse, do not spin wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Recommended Manual Transmission Shifting
Speeds
The manufacturer recommends that you use the shift
speeds listed in the chart below.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
EnSpeeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
gine
3.7L
Accel. 15 (24)
24
34
47
56
(39)
(55)
(76)
(90)
Cruise 10 (16)
19
27
37
41
(31)
(43)
(60)
(66)
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
Recommended Manual Transmission Downshifting
Speeds
To prevent clutch and transmission damage, your vehicle
should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those
listed in the chart below:
Manual Transmission Downshift
(KM/H)
Gear
6th to
5th to
4th to
Selec5th
4th
3rd
tion
Maxi100
80 mph 60 mph
mum
mph
(128
(96
Speed
(160
km/h) km/h)
km/h)
Speeds in MPH
3rd to
2nd
2nd to
1st
40 mph 20 mph
(64
(32
km/h) km/h)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the recommended downshifting
speeds may cause the engine to over speed and/or
damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is
depressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into P (Park) only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from R (Reverse), P (Park), or N
(Neutral) into any forward gear when the engine
is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
247
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
(Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
Shift Lock Manual Override — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual
override. The manual override may be used in the event
that the shift lever should fail to move from Park with the
key in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed. To
operate the shift lock manual override, perform the
following steps:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove the
shift lock manual override cover which is located on the
PRNDL bezel.
3. Depress and maintain firm pressure on the service
brake pedal.
4. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override
opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.
5. Move the shift lever into the N (Neutral) position.
6. The vehicle may then be started in N (Neutral).
Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized
dealer, if the shift lock manual override has been used.
STARTING AND OPERATING
249
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of P (Park) and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. Always depress the brake pedal first, before
moving the gear selector out of P (Park).
4–Speed Automatic Transmission (3.7L Engine)
Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
shift lever between these gears.
5
Automatic Shift Controls
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position into another gear range.
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
P (Park)
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first,
then place the selector in P (Park) position.
WARNING!
Never use P (Park) position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
(Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
R (Reverse)
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
N (Neutral)
Shift into N (Neutral) when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N (Neutral) can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
D (Drive)
For most city and highway driving.
251
2 (Second)
For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow. Begins at a stop in low gear
with automatic upshift to 2nd gear. Will not shift to 3rd.
1 (First)
For hard pulling at low speeds in mud, sand, snow, or on
steep grades. Begins and stays in low gear with no
upshift. Provides engine compression braking at low
speeds.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth and fifth speed (Overdrive).
The transmission will automatically shift from 3rd gear to
Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
• the transmission selector is in D (Drive);
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature;
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
• the “TOW/HAUL” button has not been activated;
• transmission has reached normal operating temperature.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the
transmission cools down. After cooldown, the transmission will resume normal operation.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
STARTING AND OPERATING
operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, the transmission will
shift to 3rd gear and 4th will be enabled under steady
cruise conditions.
253
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired,
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the transmission limp home mode
will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission will
remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to
a stop.
Tow/Haul Button
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Turn off the engine, be sure to turn the key to the
LOCK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists, P
(Park), R (Reverse), and N (Neutral) will continue to
operate. Only Second gear range will operate in the D
(Drive) shifter position. Have the transmission checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
5–Speed Automatic Transmission (4.0L Engine)
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles.
STARTING AND OPERATING
255
gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the
engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first.
P (Park)
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first,
then place the selector in P (Park) position.
WARNING!
Automatic Shift Controls
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the
key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission
Never use P (Park) position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
5
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
(Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
R (Reverse)
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
N (Neutral)
Shift into N (Neutral) when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N (Neutral) can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
D (Drive)
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The D (Drive) position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the shifter left (-) or right (+) when the
shifter is in the D (Drive) position, allowing the selection
STARTING AND OPERATING
of the desired top gear. For example, if the driver shifts
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but can shift down to 2
(second) or 1 (first), when needed.
WARNING!
1
1
2
1-2
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled 5th speed (Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift from 4th gear to Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
• the transmission selector is in D (Drive);
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s) Allowed
257
3
1-3
4
1-4
D
1-5
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
left “D(-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift to
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed
down.
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature;
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
• transmission has reached normal operating temperature.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature. This feature improves the warm up time of
the engine and transmission.
During cold temperature operation, the transmission
may not downshift from 2nd (2) gear to 1st (1) gear after
the initial 1st (1) to 2nd (2) gear upshift.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the transmission limp home mode
will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission will
remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to
a stop.
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Turn off the engine, be sure to turn the key to the
LOCK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists, P
(Park), R (Reverse), and N (Neutral) will continue to
operate. Only Second gear range will operate in the D
(Drive) shifter position. Have the transmission checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
259
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at light throttle. It engages at
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed
drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration,
the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages. The
feature is operational in Overdrive and in Drive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Manually shifting between 3 (third gear) and 4 (fourth
gear) positions (using the ERS shift control) will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of
Overdrive.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
MP 143 Single-Speed Part-Time Transfer Case —
If Equipped
Operating Information/Precautions
This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the center console.
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case provides 2 mode
positions: 2 (rear) wheel drive high range (2WD) and 4
wheel drive high range (4WD LOCK).
The electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the 2 wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired
position - refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK position is designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the
transfer case.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Since 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there is
a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The “4WD” Indicator Light (located in the
display under the tachometer) will flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met. To
retry a shift: return the control knob back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
261
2WD⇔ 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine
either RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed
if the key is in the accessory position.
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are
spinning (no traction). In this situation, the “4WD”
Indicator Light (located in the display under the tachometer) will flash. At this time, reduce speed and stop
spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or
excessive loading.
MP 140 Single-Speed Full-Time Transfer Case —
If Equipped
Operating Information/Precautions
The MP 140 is a single speed (HI range only) transfer case
which provides convenient full-time all-wheel drive. No
driver interaction is required. This transfer case employs
an inter-axle differential that divides engine torque almost evenly with 48 percent torque to the front axle and
52 percent torque to the rear axle, this allows the front
and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds, on all road
surfaces. The Brake Traction Control System (BTC),
which combines standard ABS and Traction Control,
provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow
additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than lowslung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover.
STARTING AND OPERATING
263
PARKING BRAKE
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull
up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
NOTE: The instrument cluster “Brake Warning Light”
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving
the vehicle.
5
Parking Brake
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked, and
the gear shift lever is in the P (Park) position (automatic
transmission) or R (Reverse) or 1st gear (manual transmission). When parking on a hill, you should apply the
parking brake before placing the gear shift lever in P
(Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out
of P (Park).
WARNING!
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in P (Park), a manual transmission in
R (Reverse) or 1st gear. Failure to do so may allow
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
265
WARNING!
Significant over or under inflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot
lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may
feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow. This is normal.
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop.
The pump motor makes a low humming noise during
operation, which is normal.
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed after-market radios or telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake
System is functioning.
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
267
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever possible.
• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking or stopping.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
ability, and control.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
slow speeds.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
269
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
5
NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire Sizing Chart
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
271
EXAMPLE:
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING
273
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
5
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
STARTING AND OPERATING
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
275
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
277
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire properly inflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
279
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either
the face of the driver’s door, or the driver’s side “B” pillar.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
5
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
CAUTION!
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
281
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
dealer for radial tire repairs.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
5
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do
not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what
the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
STARTING AND OPERATING
283
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
• Driving style
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Alignment and Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right.
Alignment will not correct this problem. See your authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains or other traction aids that meet SAE
Type “S” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
285
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe
the following precautions:
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires and
other suspension components, it is important that only
chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can
cause serious vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further
use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten
after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions
for usage. Always use the lower suggested operating
speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the
speed recommended by the manufacturer.
5
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted with
P235/65R17 tires.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
tires other than P235/65R17 tires. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking
structural or body damage to your vehicle.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The Premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
287
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
— IF EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (–11°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
3 hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to
the “Tires — General Information” in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven, this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
be turned off. The system will automatically update and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than 3 hours) placard of 33 psi (227
kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING
289
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Base System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. The audible
chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each
condition that it detects. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer. The
STARTING AND OPERATING
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24
km/h) to receive this information. A low spare tire will
not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
illuminate or the chime to sound.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will
sound when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle
will repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime,
until the fault condition no longer exists. If the ignition
key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists.
NOTE: Your vehicle is either equipped with the standard compact spare tire or an optional non-matching full
size spare tire. Both of these spare tires do not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, they will not be
291
monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
In the event that the non-matching full size or compact
spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, each
ignition key cycle will still show the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to be ON, and a chime to
sound. After the original road tire has been properly
repaired, and put back onto the vehicle in place of the
non-matching full size or compact spare tire, the TPMS
will update automatically, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will be OFF as long as none of the
road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will sound when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. The audible chime
will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition
that it detects.
In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will display a graphic of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPA or BAR.
NOTE: A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
293
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have
been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Check TPM System Message
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible
chime will sound when a system fault is detected.
The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes, without an
audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists.
The EVIC will display the “CHECK TPM SYSTEM”
message for 3 seconds. This text message is then followed
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of the pressure
value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPA or BAR.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
will be displayed instead of dashes.
NOTE: Your vehicle is either equipped with the standard compact spare tire or an optional non-matching full
size spare tire. Both of these spare tires do not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, they will not be
monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
In the event that the non-matching full size or compact
spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, the
next ignition key cycle will still show the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to be ON, a chime to sound,
and the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
still show the low tire pressure value flashing on the
graphic display.
STARTING AND OPERATING
However, driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message on the EVIC. This text message will
then be followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place
of the flashing low pressure value. For every subsequent
key cycle, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will be ON, a chime will sound, a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message will be displayed in the EVIC, and
the graphic display will have “- -“ in place of a pressure
value. After the original road tire has been properly
repaired, and put back onto the vehicle in place of the
non-matching full size or compact spare tire, the TPMS
will update the graphic display on the EVIC with a new
tire pressure value instead of “- -“, and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will be OFF as long as none of
the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
295
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.7L Engine (If Equipped)
The 3.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium
gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality
regular gasolines, and in some circumstances may result
in poorer performance.
4.0L Engine (If Equipped)
The 4.0L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane
range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use
of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal
conditions, the use of premium gasoline will not provide
a benefit over high quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer
performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
297
Over 40 auto manufacturer’s world wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
CAUTION!
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
299
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
STARTING AND OPERATING
301
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel cap
(gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
CAUTION!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on.
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of
this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler
cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the
tank filled.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
303
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
5
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
STARTING AND OPERATING
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
305
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
5
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs. (1 587
kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weightdistributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
vehicle. If you use a standard weight- carrying hitch,
you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an
accident.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
307
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
5
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
309
5
Weight Distributing Hitch System
Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2,000 lbs
(907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the
standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.
See your dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
3.7L/6-Speed
Manual
3.7L/6-Speed
Manual
3.7L/
Automatic
3.7L/
Automatic
3.7L/
Automatic w/
Cooler
3.7L/
Automatic
w/Cooler
4.0L/
Automatic
Model
Frontal Area
311
4x2
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
4x4
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
4x2
7,150 lbs (3 243 kg)
4x4
7,400 lbs ( 3 356 kg)
4x2
9,850 lbs (4 468 kg)
4x4
10,100 lbs (4 581 kg)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.94
square meters)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
4x2
7,150 lbs (3 243 kg)
32 Sq. Ft. (2.97
square meters)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
40 Sq. Ft. (3.72
square meters)
40 Sq. Ft. (3.72
square meters)
32 Sq. Ft. (2.97
square meters)
32 Sq. Ft. (2.97
square meters)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.94
square meters)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
350 lbs (159 kg)
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
4.0L/
Automatic
4.0L/
Automatic w/
Cooler
4.0L/
Automatic w/
Cooler
4x4
7,400 lbs ( 3 356 kg)
4x2
9,850 lbs (4 468 kg)
4x4
10,100 lbs (4 581 kg)
32 Sq. Ft. (2.97
square meters)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.94
square meters)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.94
square meters)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information section in this manual.
When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) between 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) and 5,000 lbs (2 268
kg)
The following chart provides maximum trailer weight
ratings towable for the following engine/transmission
combinations, ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
3.7L/
Automatic w/
Cooler
3.7L/
Automatic
w/Cooler
4.0L/
Automatic w/
Cooler
4.0L/
Automatic w/
Cooler
Model
Frontal Area
313
4x2
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
9,850 lbs (4 468 kg)
4x4
10,100 lbs (4 581 kg)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.94
square meters)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
4x2
9,850 lbs (4 468 kg)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.94
square meters)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
4x4
10,100 lbs (4 581 kg)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.94
square meters)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.94
square meters)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
500 lbs (227 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information section in this manual.
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
315
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
5
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P (Park). With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into R (Reverse). Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the
trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
317
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
5
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
STARTING AND OPERATING
319
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
7- Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
4 - Pin Connector
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range
should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — TOW/HAUL (If Equipped)
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, press the “TOW HAUL” button when driving in
hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on
more severe grades. Refer to “Transmission Shifting” in
this section.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more information.
321
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing – 2WD Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft
is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
transmission damage.
Towing — 4WD or All-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a N (Neutral) position in the transfer case.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
䡵 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
6
324
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Your vehicle’s hazard warning flasher is an emergency
warning system. When you activate it, all front and rear
directional signals will flash intermittently. Use it when
your vehicle is disabled on or near the road. It warns
other drivers to steer clear of you and your vehicle. This
is an emergency warning system, not to be used when the
vehicle is in motion.
To activate the warning flashers, press the button on the
lower switch bank (below the climate controls). To turn
the warning flashers off, press the button again.
Hazard Warning Switch
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in N
(Neutral), but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
Control to maximum heat, the Mode Control to floor, and
the Fan Control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
325
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
6
326
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in the left rear trim panel behind the second row seat.
Jack Storage Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
327
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
6
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
328
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the
Lug Wrench to rotate the nut counter clockwise until the
spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to
allow to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in P (Park). Turn OFF the ignition.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left
rear wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
329
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove spare tire.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket. Assemble the tools by connecting the driver to the extension, and then to the lug wrench.
6
330
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front tires, place it in
the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be
changed. For the rear tires, place it under the axle by the
wheel to be changed. Position the jack handle on the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
Front Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
lug nuts with cone-shaped end toward wheel. Lightly
tighten the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle
off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
331
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
10. Lower the jack to it’s fully closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper locations.
6
332
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP STARTING
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area immediately with large quantities
of water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12 volts.
Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or
bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if equipped),
DO NOT jump-start the battery.
If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot,
proceed as follows:
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
as watch bands or bracelets which might make an
unintended electrical contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place
the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition
OFF on both vehicles.
3. Turn OFF heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
333
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing
point before attempting jump start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
6
334
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recommended. Attach towing device to main structural members of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles
under tow must be observed.
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition key in the
OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30
mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed 15
miles (25 km).
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km )
or faster than 30 mph, it must be towed on a flatbed, or
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground, or with the front end raised and the rear wheels
on a towing dolly.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, with the rear wheels on the
ground, at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than
15 miles (25 km) can cause severe transmission damage.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Engine Compartment – 4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition
And Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 350
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
7
336
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Driveline And Steering Component
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 360
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Hydraulic Clutch Fluid — Manual
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
䡵 Fuses (Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . . 371
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Head Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Left Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Right Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Front Fog Light (Front Fascia Mounted) . . . . . 380
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . 381
䡵 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
337
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
7
338
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.7L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
339
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 4.0L
7
340
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
341
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
7
342
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
343
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
7
344
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if any apply to you:
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)
• Stop and go driving
• Extensive engine idling
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trip driving of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)
• Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service)
• Trailer towing
• If equipped for and operating with E–85 (ethanol) fuel
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown in schedule “B” of the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule “A” of the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this manual
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
345
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
346
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (3.7L Engine)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil
filler cap shows the recommended engine oil viscosity
for your vehicle.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
authorized dealer, service station, or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil can be
safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Viscosity (4.0L Engine)
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine
oil filler cap shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
should be used instead of a chassis hoist (3.7L Only).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of the manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar威 engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if required. See your authorized dealer for service
At the mileage indicated in the appropriate “Maintenance Schedule”, all belts and tensioner should be
checked for condition. Improper belt tension can cause
belt slippage and failure.
347
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,
glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the mileage specified in the appropriate maintenance chart. The entire set should be replaced if there is
any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug.
Refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label
in the engine compartment for spark plug information.
7
348
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
converter as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
349
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing.
• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
• Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
350
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Crankcase Emission Control System
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on “Maintenance Schedule A.” If,
however, you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or
severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected
periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals
shown on “Maintenance Schedule B.”
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
WARNING!
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent replacement of the fuel filter which is mounted
in the fuel tank may be necessary.
The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of
engine backfire. Do not remove the air cleaner
unless it is necessary for repair or maintenance.
Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner
removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Always wash hands
after handling the battery.
351
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
7
352
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
additional warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with
the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts,
and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended
fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
NOTE: Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short period of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system.
This noise should be considered normal, and does not in
any way damage the steering system.
353
Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication
All driveline and steering components are sealed and do
not require lubrication. Driveshafts are not serviceable.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, tailgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
7
354
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator antifreeze) rated not to freeze at -25°F (-31°C). Operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
355
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot antifreeze/
coolant or steam from your radiator. If you see or
hear steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check antifreeze/coolant protection every 12 months
(before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable).
If antifreeze/coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
antifreeze/coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser
(if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
7
356
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
antifreeze/coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap
is sealing properly, the antifreeze/coolant will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
At the intervals shown in the appropriate “Maintenance
Schedule,” the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled.
If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable
amount of sediment, clean and flush with reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze/coolant solution.
Discard old antifreeze/coolant solution according to recommended procedure.
Selection Of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended antifreeze/
coolant, refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for
correct antifreeze/coolant type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of antifreeze/coolant other than the specified HOAT antifreeze/coolant may result in decreased corrosion protection and engine damage.
If a non-HOAT antifreeze/coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, it should
be replaced with the specified antifreeze/coolant
as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
antifreeze/coolant products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may
not be compatible with the antifreeze/coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based antifreeze/coolant. Use of
Propylene Glycol base antifreeze/coolant is not
recommended.
357
Adding Engine Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze/
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
antifreeze/coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000
miles before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same antifreeze/coolant throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
antifreeze/coolant.
When adding antifreeze/coolant, a minimum solution of
50% recommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures
below -34°F (-37°C) are anticipated.
7
358
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/antifreeze (coolant) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add antifreeze/coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build
up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
NOTE: Mixing antifreeze/coolant types will decrease
the life of the antifreeze/coolant and will require more
frequent antifreeze/coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
antifreeze/coolant, and to insure that antifreeze/coolant
will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank.
WARNING!
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based antifreeze/coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
children, do not store ethylene glycol based antifreeze/
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a
physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the antifreeze/coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
not need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
antifreeze/coolant freeze point or replacing antifreeze/
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
359
When additional antifreeze/coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of
operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the
thermostat opens, allowing hot antifreeze/coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
• Check antifreeze/coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze/
7
360
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
coolant needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent antifreeze/coolant additions are required,
or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop
when the engine cools, the cooling system should be
pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain antifreeze/coolant concentration at 50%
HOAT antifreeze/coolant (minimum) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps
and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
are present. Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could
cause failure.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the appropriate “Maintenance Schedule” in
Section 8 for suggested service intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
361
Brake and Power Steering System Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears,
cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to
examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat
sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil
change.
7
362
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the BRAKE warning light shows system failure
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
WARNING!
• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter. Do
not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake
fluid as seal damage will result.
Automatic Transmission
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.
363
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Fluid Level Check — 42RLE (3.7L Engine)
Your vehicle is equipped with a capped dipstick tube, it
is sealed and should not be tampered with. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid
level is set properly.
7
364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check — W5A580 (4.0L Engine)
Your vehicle is equipped with a capped dipstick tube, it
is sealed and should not be tampered with. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid
level is set properly.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in
detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers
should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid — Manual Transmission
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid, refer to Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
Manual Transmission
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual transmission fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16” (4.76 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
365
Frequency of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
lubricant has become contaminated with water. If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.
Adding Fluid
Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid
begins to run out of the hole.
Drain
First remove fill plug (B), then drain plug (C). Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is
15–25 ft.lbs. (20–34 N·m).
7
366
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid, refer to
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid, refer to
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near sea-coast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Bird droppings.
367
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains,
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
7
368
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept
clear and open.
• Use Mopar威 Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
heavy soil, use Mopar威 Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads,
steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar威 cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
369
• For grease stains, apply Mopar威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essentials威 products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar威 Total Clean, then
Mopar威 Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do
not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar威 Total
Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
7
370
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar威 Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
371
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE)
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label
that identifies each component is printed on the inside of
the cover.
Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
7
372
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J1
40 Amp
Green
J2
30 Amp
Pink
J3
40 Amp
Green
J4
25 Amp
Natural
J5
25 Amp
Natural
J6
40 Amp
Green
J7
30 Amp
Pink
J8
40 Amp
Green
J9
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
Power Folding Seat
Transfer Case/Pwr
Liftgate Module
Rear Door Module
(RR DOOR NODE)
Driver Door Node
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J10
30 Amp
Pink
J11
30 Amp
Pink
J13
Passenger Door Node
J14
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/ESP
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/ESP
Power Memory Seat
(If Equipped)
PZEV Motor/Flex
Fuel
J15
J17
J18
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
Mini
Fuse
Description
Hdlp Wash Relay/
Manual Tuning Valve
Sway Bar/
THATCHAM LockUnlock/Power Sliding Door Module
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) — Main
EBL (Rear Window
Defogger)
Rear Blower
Starter Solenoid
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) Trans
Range
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
J19
60 Amp
Yellow
J20
30 Amp
Pink
J21
20 Amp
Yellow
J22
25 Amp
Natural
M1
20 Amp
Yellow
M2
M3
M4
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Radiator Fan
Front Wiper LO/HI
Front/Rear Washer
Sunroof Module
Center High Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)/
Brake Switch
Trailer Lighting
Frt/Rear Axle Lockers
Trailer Tow
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M5
25 Amp
Natural
M6
20 Amp
Yellow
M7
20 Amp
Yellow
M8
20 Amp
Yellow
M9
20 Amp
Yellow
373
Description
Inverter
Power Outlet #1/Rain
Sensor
Power Outlet #2
(BATT/ACC SELECT)
Front Heated Seat
Rear Heated Seat (If
Equipped)
7
374
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M10
20 Amp
Yellow
M11
10 Amp
Red
Description
Ignition Off Draw —
Vehicle Entertainment
System (IOD-VES),
Satellite Digital Audio
Receiver (SDARS),
DVD, Hands Free
Module (HFM), RADIO, Antenna (ANT),
Universal Garage
Door Opener
(UGDO), Vanity
Lamp (VANITY LP)
(Ignition Off Draw)
IOD-HVAC/ATC,
MW SENSR, Underhood Lamp (UH
LMP)
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M12
30 Amp
Green
M13
20 Amp
Yellow
M14
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Amplifier (AMP)
Ignition Off Draw—
Cabin Compartment
Node (IOD-CCN),
Wireless Control
Module (WCM), SIREN, Clock Module
(CLK MOD), MultiFunction Control
Switch (MULTIFCTN
SW)
Trailer Tow (Export
Only)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M15
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
COL MOD, IR SNS,
Heater Ventilation,
Air Conditioning/
Automatic Temperature Control (HVAC/
ATC), Rear View
Mirror (RR VW MIR),
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN), Transfer
Case Switch (T-CASE
SW), RUN/ST, MultiFunction Control
Switch (MULTIFTCN
SW), Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM), Glow
Plug Module (GLW
PLG MOD) — Export
Diesel Only
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M16
10 Amp
Red
M17
15 Amp
Blue
M18
15 Amp
Blue
M19
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
M20
375
Description
Occupant Restraint
Controller/Occupant
Classification Module
(ORC/OCM)
Left Tail/License/
Park Lamp (LT-TAIL/
LIC/PRK LMP)
Right Tail/Park/Run
Lamp (RT-TAIL/
PRK/RUN LMP)
Auto Shut Down
(ASD #1 and #2)
Cabin Compartment
Node Interior Light
(CCN INT LIGHT),
Switch Bank (SW
BANK), Steering Control Module (SCM)
7
376
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M21
20 Amp
Yellow
M22
10 Amp
Red
M23
10 Amp
Red
M24
25 Amp
Natural
M25
20 Amp
Yellow
M26
10 Amp
Red
Description
Auto Shut Down
(ASD #3)
Right Horn (RT
HORN (HI/LOW)
Left Horn (LT HORN
(HI/LOW)
Rear Wiper (REAR
WIPER)
Fuel Pump (FUEL
PUMP), Diesel Lift
Pump (DSL LIFT
PUMP) — Export
Only
Power Mirror Switch
(PWR MIRR SW),
Driver Window
Switch (DRVR WIND
SW)
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M27
10 Amp
Red
M28
10 Amp
Red
M29
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
M30
M31
M32
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Ignition Switch (IGN
SW), Window Module
(WIN MOD)
Next Generation Controller (NGC), Transmission Feed (TRANS
FEED), J1962
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
Rear Wiper Module
(RR WIPER MOD),
Power Folding Mirror
(PWR FOLD MIR)
Back-Up Lamps (B/U
LAMPS)
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), TT
EUROPE
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M33
10 Amp
Red
M34
M35
M36
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Next Generation Controller (NGC), Global
Powertrain Engine
Controller (GPEC)
Park Assist (PRK
ASST), Heater Ventilation, Air Conditioning Module (HVAC
MOD), Headlamp
Wash (HDLP WASH),
Compass (COMPAS)
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet #3
(BATT)
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M37
10 Amp
Red
M38
25 Amp
Natural
377
Description
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP), Stop Lamp
Switch (STP LP SW),
Fuel Pump Rly Hi
Control
Lock/Unlock Motors
(LOCK/UNLOCK
MTRS)
7
378
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Liftgate Lamp . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead Console Lights . .
Reading Light . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Bulb No.
. . WL212–2
. . . . . . 567
PLW214–2A
. . WL212–2
LIGHT BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9008 H13
Front Park/Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Front Sidemarker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4057K
Center High Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Fog Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H10 9145
License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4057K
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Head Light
379
5. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
Left Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine compartment to access the headlamp bulb lock ring.
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right (full
right lock).
3. Firmly grasp the lock ring on the back of the headlamp
unit housing.
2. Remove the door in the left wheel liner by twisting
counter clockwise. Access to the bulb can be gained
through the wheel liner hole.
4. Rotate the lock ring on the back of the headlamp
housing counter-clockwise to unlock it.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean
the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Right Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine compartment to access the turn signal bulb.
3. Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove.
7
380
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
Front Side Marker
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the grille assembly, as follows:
a. Remove eight fasteners.
b. Remove two screws from each headlamp.
Front Fog Light (Front Fascia Mounted)
1. Reach between the front fascia and wheel liner from
under the vehicle.
2. Turn the front fog light bulb 1/4 turn counter clockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
CAUTION!
c. Remove two scrivets from the center of the grille.
d. Remove one push pin from the top of each fender.
e. Pull the grille assembly toward you to disconnect
the grille clips to the fender and the headlamp ballstuds to the front end module.
3. Disconnect electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean
the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
381
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, and Back-Up Lights
Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
1. Open the lift gate.
1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.
2. Remove the two push pins.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector and washer hose (if
equipped) from CHMSL.
3. Pull lamp straight back and disconnect electrical connection.
3. Replace the CHMSL.
4. Remove the two screws attaching the backplate to the
lamp assembly.
5. Pull the backplate straight back from the lamp housing.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Remove the bulb from the backplate.
7
382
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified Engine Oil)
4.0 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified Engine Oil)
Cooling System *
3.7 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula)
4.0 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
19.5 Gallons
Metric
73.8 Liters
5 Qts
6 Qts
4.7 Liters
5.7 Liters
14 Qts
13 Liters
14 Qts
13 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
383
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (3.7L Engine)
Engine Oil (4.0L Engine)
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection (3.7L Engines)
Fuel Selection (4.0L Engines)
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or equivalent.
Use SAE 10W-30, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or
equivalent.
Mopar威 Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
87 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method
87 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method Acceptable, 89 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method Preferred
7
384
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Brake Master Cylinder/Manual
Transmission Clutch System
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar威 Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent (meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-9224)
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
SAE 80W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Mopar威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 386
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
386
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part, which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule ⴖBⴖ. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)
• Stop and go driving
• Excessive engine idling
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)
• Trailer towing
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service)
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Off-road or desert driving
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow “Schedule B” of the
“Maintenance Schedules” section of this manual.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant/anti-freeze every 102,000
miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, whichever comes first,
and follow “Schedule B” of the “Maintenance Schedules”
section of this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule “B.”
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule “B.”
387 M
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
At Each Stop for Fuel
D
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully UL
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent, add as required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
388
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
• Inspect brake hoses.
• Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the CV joints (If equipped) and front suspension components.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
S
master cylinder, and transmission, and add as needed.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• After completion of off-road operation, the underside
of the vehicle should be thoroughly inspected. Examine threaded fasteners for looseness.
SCHEDULE “B”
Schedule “B”
Follow this schedule if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)
• Stop and go driving
• Excessive engine idling
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)
• Trailer towing
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service)
389 M
• Off-road or desert driving
• If equipped for and operated with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow “Schedule B” of the
“Maintenance Schedules” section of this manual.
S
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant/anti-freeze every 102,000
miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, whichever comes first,
and follow “Schedule B” of the “Maintenance Schedules”
section of this manual.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 390 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
(10 000)
X
X
9,000
(15 000)
X
12,000
(20 000)
X
15,000
(25 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary (3.7L Only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
18,000
(30 000)
X
X
21,000
(35 000)
X
24,000
(40 000)
X
X
27,000
(45 000)
X
391 M
30,000
(50 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 392 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed.
33,000
(55 000)
X
36,000
(60 000)
X
X
39,000
(65 000)
X
42,000
(70 000)
X
45,000
(75 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect manual transmission fluid, add as necessary (3.7L Only).
Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid.
Replace main sump filter and spin-on cooler return
filter (if equipped).‡
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not
required if belt was previously.
48,000
(80 000)
X
X
X
51,000
(85 000)
X
54,000
(90 000)
X
X
57,000
(95 000)
X
393 M
60,000
(100 000)
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
X
8
X
M 394 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Drain and refill the transfer case fluid.
A Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze.
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
48,000
(80 000)
51,000
(85 000)
54,000
(90 000)
57,000
(95 000)
60,000
(100 000)
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not
required if belt was previously replaced.
63,000
(105 000)
X
66,000
(110 000)
X
X
69,000
(115 000)
X
72,000
(120 000)
X
395 M
75,000
(125 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 396 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not
required if belt was previously replaced.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary (3.7L Only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
78,000
(130 000)
X
X
81,000
(135 000)
X
84,000
(140 000)
X
X
87,000
(145 000)
X
90,000
(150 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
necessary.
Replace the spark plugs (4.0L Only).
Inspect the timing belt, replace if necessary (4.0L
Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not
required if belt was previously replaced.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if
not done at 60,000 miles (100 000 km).
93,000
(155 000)
X
96,000
(160 000)
X
99,000
(165 000)
X
X
102,000
(170 000)
X
105,000
(175 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
397 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 398 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary (3.7L Only).
Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid.
Replace main sump filter and spin-on cooler return
filter (if equipped).‡
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not
required if belt was previously replaced.
108,000
(180 000)
X
X
X
111,000
(185 000)
X
114,000
(190 000)
X
X
117,000
(195 000)
X
120,000
(200 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Drain and refill the transfer case fluid.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if
not replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
108,000
(180 000)
111,000
(185 000)
114,000
(190 000)
117,000
(195 000)
399 M
120,000
(200 000)
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 400 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not
required if belt was previously replaced.
123,000
(205 000)
X
126,000
(210 000)
X
X
129,000
(215 000)
X
132,000
(220 000)
X
135,000
(225 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, replace if
necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary (3.7L Only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not
required if belt was previously replaced.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if
not done at 120,000 miles (200 000 km).
138,000
(230 000)
X
141,000
(235 000)
X
144,000
(240 000)
X
X
147,000
(245 000)
X
401 M
150,000
(250 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
402
SCHEDULE “B”
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
† Applies only if vehicle is used for frequent trailer
towing or fleet/commercial service.
〫 This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain
emissions warranty.
‡Off-highway operation, trailer towing, taxi, limousine,
bus, snow plowing, or other types of commercial service
or prolonged operation with heavy loading, especially in
hot weather, require front and rear axle service indicated
with a ‡ in Schedule “B”. Perform these services if the
vehicle is usually operated under these conditions.
SCHEDULE “A”
403 M
Schedule “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace
if necessary.
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary (3.7L Only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add as necessary.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12,000
(20 000)
[12]
X
X
18,000
(30 000)
[18]
X
X
24,000
(40 000)
[24]
X
X
30,000
(50 000)
[30]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 404 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
36,000
(60 000)
[36]
X
X
X
42,000
(70 000)
[42]
X
X
48,000
(80 000)
[48]
X
X
54, 000
(90 000)
[54]
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if
belt was previously replaced.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze. Where both
time and mileage are indicated, follow the interval which occurs first.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary (3.7L
Only).
Inspect transfer case fluid, add as necessary.
60,000
(100 000)
[60]
X
X
X
X
X
66,000
(110 000)
[66]
X
X
72,000
(120 000)
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
405 M
78,000
(130 000)
[78]
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 406 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace if necS
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
essary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Replace the spark plugs (4.0L Only).
Inspect the timing belt, replace if necessary (4.0L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if previously replaced (3.7L Only).
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if previously replaced (4.0L Only).
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze if not
done at 60 months.
84,000
(140 000)
[84]
X
X
90,000
(150 000)
[90]
X
X
X
96,000
(160 000)
[96]
X
X
102, 000
(170 000)
[102]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary
(3.7L Only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add as necessary.
84,000
(140 000)
[84]
90,000
(150 000)
[90]
X
X
96,000
(160 000)
[96]
407 M
102, 000
(170 000)
[102]
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 408 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if previously replaced (3.7L Only).
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if previously replaced (4.0L Only).
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary (3.7L
Only).
Drain and refill the transfer case fluid.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if not done at
102,000 miles (170 000 km).
108,000
(180 000)
[108]
X
X
X
X
114,000
(190 000)
[114]
X
X
120,000
(200 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
126,000
(210 000)
[126]
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Inspect the engine air filter element, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, and replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Only).
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if previously replaced (3.7L Only).
Inspect the drive belt, and replace as needed. Not required if previously replaced (4.0L Only).
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary
(3.7L Only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add as necessary.
132,000
(220 000)
[132]
X
X
138,000
(230 000)
[138]
X
X
144,000
(240 000)
[144]
X
X
150,000
(250 000)
[150]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
409 M
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
M 410 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if not
N
C done at 120,000 miles (200 000 km).
E Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
132,000
(220 000)
[132]
138,000
(230 000)
[138]
144,000
(240 000)
[144]
150,000
(250 000)
[150]
X
〫 This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain
emissions warranty.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform
Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 415
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
9
412
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
413
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
9
414
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
415
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
9
416
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call Toll Free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
417
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
9
418
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
420
INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,265
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 350
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,232
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,170
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,75
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,166
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,265
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,166
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,254,363
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,384
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,258
INDEX
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
256
144
144
384
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 24
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,265
421
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,169
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 74
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,184
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,299
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
10
422
INDEX
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cargo Slide Out System
Load N Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 227
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65,69,72
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,208,219
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,178,183
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,184
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,184
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
INDEX
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 356,382,383
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . . 350
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,230,231
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,166
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
423
Used Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . 225
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 144
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 125
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 131,166
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 179
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10
424
INDEX
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 341,386
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,339
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,339
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,299
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296,382
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,382,383
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 60
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,299
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,383
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,379,381
INDEX
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 383
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,380
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
425
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296,383
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,301,302
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,302,340
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10
426
INDEX
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,249,255
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,295
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 134
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,361
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Ignition . . . . . . . . .
Key . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Key Removal
Illuminated Entry . .
Infant Restraint . . . .
...
...
..
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 14
. . 14
. . 14
. . 20
64,65
INDEX
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,164
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,329
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
427
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 68,69
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,119
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,170
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
10
428
INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,379
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,166
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,170,380
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,164
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 173
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,379
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,379,381
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 164
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Load N Go
Sliding Cargo Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
INDEX
Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173,341
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,364
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,384
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
429
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,182
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,415
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
10
430
INDEX
Odometer
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,383
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,383
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345,382
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,382
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,341
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,251,257
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,257
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,325
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 416
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 274
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268,352
INDEX
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . 136,140,188
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,136,140
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,221
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
431
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 226
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
10
432
INDEX
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,221
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 42
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,72
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,370
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,166
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,208,219
INDEX
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Shift Lock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,254
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,167,379,381
Sliding Cargo Floor
Load N Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
433
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268,352
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 47
10
434
INDEX
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table, Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 164
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 274
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,278,417
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,275
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,269
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,258
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
INDEX
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,169
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
435
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,254
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,254
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmitter, Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,167,379,381
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
10
436
INDEX
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Utility Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,184
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275,303
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,143
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,354
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 369
Download PDF

advertising